JP2021062159A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a first specific image, and a second specific image differing from the first specific image, and a ratio of control to an advantageous state differs. By allowing a control period of a movable body to differ from an update period of a specific image and an effect image, enlarged display of the specific image and performance operation of the movable body are allowed to become conspicuous by the effect image. The game machine can execute a first performance following tentative stop of identification information, a second performance for displaying a character image following restart of variation display of identification information after execution of the first performance, a first information display performance for displaying first information capable of specifying how many times variation display is restarted in variation display after execution of the second performance, and second information display performance for displaying second information that is information corresponding to the first information and has lower visibility than the first information after execution of the first information display performance. An execution period of the second performance is longer than an execution period of the first information display performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional game machine, the effect result can be notified by the operation of the movable body (effect operation), and when the movable body is operated, the effect image (effect image) is displayed on the image display unit to move the movable body. Some emphasize the movement of the body (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-99572

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the effect image is only displayed on the image display unit when the movable body is produced.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving a game enjoyment.

The game machine of means 1
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the look-ahead advance notice effect is displayed during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. The part that limits execution),
further,
The effect executing means is
The first effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) associated with the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (for example, the special symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B)) and
A second effect (for example, a re-variable display notification effect) that displays a character image as the variable display of the specific effect identification information is restarted after the first effect is executed.
Images such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., which can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted in the variable display of 1 after executing the second effect. ) Is displayed (for example, the first variable display start count notification effect) and
After executing the first information display effect, the size of the second information corresponding to the first information and having lower visibility than the first information (for example, smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect). It is possible to execute a second information display effect (for example, a second variable display start count notification effect) that displays images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4").
The execution period of the second effect is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect period of the revariable display notification effect is 3 seconds, while provisional. The production period of the stop notification effect is 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the execution period of the second effect in which the character image of the player's attention is displayed is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 2 to 7. Conventionally, it is possible to execute variable display of specific effect identification information as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-131876 in a game machine, and during the variable display, temporary stop and revariable display of specific effect identification information are possible. There is something that can be done. Some such game machines display the character after the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information, and then execute the revariable display.

However, there is a problem that the display of the character cannot be produced for an appropriate period of time, and the game entertainment cannot be improved. It is necessary to provide a game machine that can improve the interest of the game by paying attention to such a problem.

The game machine of means 2
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variablely displaying the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern).
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means is
The first effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) associated with the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (for example, the special symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B)) and
A second effect (for example, a re-variable display notification effect) that displays a character image as the variable display of the specific effect identification information is restarted after the first effect is executed.
Images such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., which can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted in the variable display of 1 after executing the second effect. ) Is displayed (for example, the first variable display start count notification effect) and
After executing the first information display effect, the size of the second information corresponding to the first information and having lower visibility than the first information (for example, smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect). It is possible to execute a second information display effect (for example, a second variable display start count notification effect) that displays images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4").
The execution period of the second effect is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect period of the revariable display notification effect is 3 seconds, while provisional. The production period of the stop notification effect is 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution period of the second effect in which the character image of interest of the player is displayed is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means can execute the second effect in a plurality of different modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image of a different character as the revariable display notification effect according to the number of revariable displays. Possible part),
The ratio of the advantageous state differs depending on the mode of the second effect (for example, the case where the image of the character C is finally displayed has the highest expectation of a big hit, and the case where the image of the character A is finally displayed. Is the part where the highest jackpot expectation is set)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be attracted to the mode of the second production, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 2 or the means 3.
As pseudo-ream variable display including temporary stop and restart of specific effect identification information, normal pseudo-ream variable display (for example, variable display for executing temporary stop notification effect at the time of pseudo-ream effect) and the normal pseudo-ream variable display. Can execute different special pseudo-continuous variable display (for example, variable display that executes a special temporary stop notification effect at the time of pseudo-continuous effect).
In the special pseudo-continuous variable display, the effect executing means executes the first effect different from the normal pseudo-continuous variable display, but does not execute the second effect and the first information display effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, as a special temporary stop notification effect, the first special background image, the second special background image, and the second special background image are displayed according to the number of revariable displays in the image display device 5. 3 The part that starts displaying one of the special background images and the part that does not execute the first variable display start count notification effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect of the special pseudo-continuous variable display being hindered by the second effect and the first information display effect.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 4.
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player.
The effect executing means is
It is an effect of notifying that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state, and it is possible to execute a advance notice effect including a specific advance notice effect (for example, a look-ahead advance notice effect).
When the first information is displayed, the execution of the specific advance notice effect is restricted, but
When the second information is displayed, the execution of the specific advance notice effect is not restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect. However, when the first variable display start count notification effect is not executed, the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect of displaying the first information being hindered by the specific advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 2 to 5.
The effect executing means is
When displaying the first information, a special effect (for example, as a part of the first variable display start number notification effect, an effect image is displayed in a color corresponding to the revariable display number in the image display device 5) according to the number of restarts. The part to be displayed) is executable and
When the second effect is executed, the execution of the special effect is restricted (for example, the hot water shown in FIGS. 12-29 (K) and 12-30 (R) has an effect during the execution of the revariable display notification effect. The part that hides the image)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect of the second effect being executed being hindered by the special effect.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 2 to the means 6.
It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. It ’s a game machine,
The effect executing means is
A special mode for suggesting control to an advantageous state (for example, a special mode for suggesting control to a jackpot gaming state during variable display as shown in variant 003SG-5), and suggestions for setting. (For example, as shown in the modified example 003SG-5, a specific mode for suggesting whether or not the set value has been changed or whether the set value has been changed since the previous startup). It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (for example, an effect during variable display) by any of the effect modes of.
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times,
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in the modified example 003SG-5, when the variable display during effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and the second number of times after the first number of times. The part where the variable display effect in a specific mode can be executed at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a figure which shows the update example of the 1st hold storage display area and the 2nd hold storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display control timer and the movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach α1 off and the super reach α2 off. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 off and the super reach β2 off. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of the movable body suggestion movement, and the image enlargement ratio in each enlarged display period. (A) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion suggestion effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode up to the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a jackpot hold memory, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a lost hold memory. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of each production period and production content in pseudo-continuous production. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the output mode of the sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus 5 in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus 5 in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus 5 in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus 5 in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus 5 in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display mode of the image display device 5 in a variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect in the modified example 003SG-1. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display mode of the image display device 5 in a variable display for executing a pseudo continuous effect in the modified example 003SG-2. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a display mode of the image display device 5 in a variable display for executing a pseudo-continuous effect in the modified example 003SG-3.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The game machine of the first form is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display differs between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlargement). The part where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period and the second 2 The part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same during the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the effect of magnifying the display and reduce the control load related to the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
After the second timing, the non-expansion period in which the specific image is not enlarged (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start of the movable body movement effect or the detachment notification effect from the end timing of the enlargement display period). Has a period until timing)
The display mode in the non-expansion period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-expansion period (for example, as a modification 109SG-2, after the enlargement display period ends, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect or an effect image. By displaying, etc., the part that differs from the image display mode on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be easily recognized that it is a non-expansion period.

The gaming machine of the fourth form is the gaming machine according to the second or third form.
The effect executing means can gradually enlarge and display the specific image even after the repetitive operation of the movable body is completed (for example, in the third enlarged display period shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). Enlarged display),
The enlargement speed of the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed of the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlargement display period is longer than the first enlargement display period. Slow speed part),
The magnifying speed of the magnified display after the repetitive operation of the movable body is completed is slower than the magnifying speed of the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). 3 The enlarged display period is the part where the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period)
According to this feature, even if the repetitive movement of the movable body is completed, the enlarged display of the specific image is continued, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the fifth form is the gaming machine according to the first to fourth forms.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the look-ahead advance notice effect is displayed during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. Part that limits execution)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the specific image from being lowered due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first to fifth aspects.
In the effect executing means, the visibility of the specific image differs between when the movable body is operated in the suggested effect and when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 10-32 and 10-). As shown in FIG. 34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body operation effect B is being executed. Is a portion where the visibility of the reach effect is reduced due to the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the specific image changes according to the operating state of the movable body, it is possible to easily understand whether it is the motion of the suggestion effect or the operation of the specific effect, and the movable body and the specific image can be understood. You can adjust the degree of attention of.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect executing means can display a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, the movable body The part that can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production),
The size of the first effect image and the size of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modification 109SG-3, an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of a movable body and an effect image according to the progress of a battle effect are used. Parts of different sizes)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image.

The gaming machine of the eighth form is the gaming machine according to the first to seventh forms.
The effect executing means can display a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, the movable body The part that can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modification 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body and the progress of the battle effect The part that makes the image transparency different from the corresponding effect image)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image having appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
A specific image can be displayed while the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
Before and after the predetermined period, different types of sound effects can be output (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM. , SE, while outputting the motion suggestion sound, the part that outputs BGM, SE, jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R during the execution of the movable body motion effect),
There are fewer types of production sounds during the predetermined period than the types of production sounds that were output immediately before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during the period T3). Is the part where only SE is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period in which the movable body does not operate.

The game machine of the form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
A specific image can be displayed while the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
The predetermined period is a period longer than the execution period of one unit operation in which the movable body is repeatedly operated, and is shorter than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21 to FIG. 10-24, the period T3 is a portion longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401).
The operating period of the movable body in the specific effect is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is , The part that is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body movement suggestion effect),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the motion in the specific effect from being mistaken for the motion in the suggestion effect, and the period of suggestion becomes longer than the operation period of the movable body in the specific effect of the suggestion target. It is also possible to prevent a decline in interest due to this.

The game machine of the form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
A specific image can be displayed while the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
During the predetermined period, at least the first low visibility state in which the visibility of the background image is low (for example, as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body movement suggestion effect and the enlarged display period are completed, and then the movable body operation effect or the disconnection notification is given. In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period).
When the movable body is started to operate after the predetermined period, the second low visibility state is set to a lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as the modified example 109SG04, the contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 are set. Is a portion that further reduces the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character by changing from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state).
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the period is a predetermined period, and it is possible to increase the attention to the movement of the movable body in the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to the morphology 12
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
The specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed during the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β1, and the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. And, if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
The movement of the movable body is started before the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in the modified example 109SG-1, the movable body is movable from a timing before the enlarged display of the ally character and the enemy character is started. The part that executes the body movement suggestion effect),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the period is a predetermined period, and it is possible to increase the attention to the repetitive movement of the movable body in the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the ninth to the twelfth forms.
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, movable body LED109SG495).
The effect executing means controls the light emitting unit to a non-light emitting state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body operation effect or the movable body operation effect is performed from the end of the third enlarged display period. The part where the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off during the period until the start of the disconnection notification effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body is not operating for a predetermined period of time.

The gaming machine of the 14th form is the gaming machine according to the 1st to 13th forms.
The movable body is a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 109SG402L and a third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body. Including and
The effect executing means is
In the repetitive operation of the suggestion effect, only one of the first movable body and the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the movable body motion suggestion effect B Then, the part that operates only the first movable body 109SG401),
In the operation of the specific effect, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, in the movable body operation effect B, the first movable body is operated. 1 Movable body 109SG401, 2nd movable body 109SG402L, 3rd movable body 109SG402R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is the movement of the suggestion effect or the operation of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 1st to 14th forms.
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, movable body LED109SG495).
The effect executing means is
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the light emitting unit is made to emit light at the first luminance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period, the second In the enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1).
In the specific effect, at least during the period when the effect result is notified, the light emitting unit is made to emit light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23). , The part that causes the movable body LED109SG495 to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1 during the execution of the movable body operation effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to recognize that it is a period in which the production result is shown, and at the same time, the interest of the period can be improved.

The game machine of the form 16
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
The specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed during the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β1, and the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. And, if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed).
When the movable body is operated in the suggested effect, it is possible to display a different type of effect image from the effect image displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example,). , As a modification 109SG-5, a portion in which different effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 between the execution of the movable body motion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect).
In the suggestion effect, the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated is larger than the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect. (For example, as a modification 109SG-5, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. More than the number of types of production images to be produced),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, many kinds of effect images are displayed at the time of suggestion effect in which the operation is repeated, so that the interest at the time of suggestion effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 17
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the suggestion motion corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the motion suggestion effect of the movable body, the movable body 5 is displayed on the image display device 5. Movable body corresponding to the motion suggestion effect (the part that displays the image corresponding to the motion suggestion effect),
In the specific effect, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the effect operation corresponding to the operation of the movable body (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body operation effect, the image display device 5 can display the movable body operation. As an image corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the effect, a part displaying an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect),
The period during which the suggested motion-corresponding image is displayed is different from the period during which the effect motion-corresponding image is displayed (for example, as the modified example 109SG-6, the display period of the movable body motion-suggested effect-corresponding image and the movable body motion-effect-corresponding). The part that makes the image display period different),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display period of the suggestion motion-corresponding image and the staging motion-corresponding image can be set to the period corresponding to each motion of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th aspect.
When displaying the effect operation compatible image, the effect execution means controls the image to a low visibility state in which the visibility is lowered (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, the movable body operation effect compatible image is displayed in the image display device 5). When displaying, the portion that reduces the visibility of the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the movable body that operates in a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to the 17th form or the 18th form.
The effect executing means is
During the period of displaying the suggested motion-corresponding image, the suggested motion-corresponding sound corresponding to the suggested motion-corresponding image can be output (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, the movable body motion suggestion effect-corresponding image in the image display device 5). Is displayed, the speaker 8L8R outputs the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding image),
During the period of displaying the effect operation compatible image, it is possible to output an effect sound corresponding to the effect operation compatible image, which is different from the suggestion operation compatible sound (for example, as a modification 109SG-6). When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect on the image display device 5, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect from the speaker 8L8R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to each corresponding image to be displayed.

The gaming machine of the form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of the 17th to 19th forms.
The effect executing means is characterized in that the image corresponding to the effect operation is displayed before the operation start timing of the movable body in the specific effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation that the movement of the movable body in the specific effect is started, and also to raise the attention to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body, and a special image is displayed before the specific effect is executed to operate the movable body. Suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed without any effect (for example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at speed V1). The body motion suggestion effect A), the effect execution means capable of executing the effect (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-19), and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a manner of approaching the movable body at the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, , A portion of the image display device 5 in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a mode of being separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31). When the body motion effect A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Part),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed. Is the part where the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, if the reach effect of the super reach α1 is being performed, the ally character A and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach α2 is being produced, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movable body can be focused on by moving the special image, so that the effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the game entertainment. it can.

The game machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and a specific effect that gradually approaches the movable body at a first speed before the specific effect is executed. By displaying a special image, a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed without operating the movable body (for example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a speed V1 The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the movable body motion suggestion effect A that moves toward the movable body 109SG401 at the speed V1 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10-19). Part) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a mode in which the special image is repeatedly acted at the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the image is displayed. In the device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a mode of being separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31). When the body motion effect A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Part),
During the display period of the special image, the effect images other than the special image are displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the movable body motion suggestion effect. During the execution of A, the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, if the reach effect of the super reach α1 is being performed, the ally character A and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movable body can be focused on by moving the special image, so that the effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the game entertainment. it can.

The game machine of the form 23 is the game machine according to the form 21 or the form 22.
The effect executing means hides the special image during a predetermined period immediately before the operation start timing of the movable body in the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F)). In addition, the part where the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the detachment notification effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is started by hiding the special image.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 21st to 23rd forms.
The first speed is a speed in a predetermined range, and the first speed changes according to the proximity of the special image within the predetermined range (for example, as shown in the modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is predetermined. (Variable part within the range of),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed in the predetermined range (for example, as shown in the modified example 109SG-7, the speed of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A. For V2, the part that is faster than the maximum speed of speed V1)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the moving speed of the special image is changed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 21st to 24th forms.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to output a plurality of operation sound effects corresponding to the repetitive operation of the movable body or the operation of the special image (for example, 0 multiple sounds are output as operation suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Possible part),
It is possible to output different operation sound effects according to the output timing (for example, multiple output start timings of the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound are provided, and at which timing the output of the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound is started. The part that can output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R according to
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the repetitive motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image is being executed, and the motion sound effect changes according to the output timing, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probabilistic symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which a ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or, driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and issuing a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 109SG)
Next, the feature unit 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the gaming board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. ..

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction. The third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the feature unit 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is a retracted position which is a lower position of the image display device 5 by being driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 10-3 (A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to the position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423, and are retracted positions which are lower positions of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -3 (A)), the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the effect position can be moved to the left-right proximity position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

In the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 and the first movable body 109SG401 are located at the suggested positions, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the retracted positions. The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the effect position. The state of being located close to the left and right sides of the movable body unit 109SG400 is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal opening big hit state and the high-speed opening big hit state described later corresponds to Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and the small hit as the judgment result at the time of winning. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the feature unit 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 109SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 109SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 109SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit that does not allow a large number of game balls to be acquired, and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 109SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-7 (B). In the feature unit 109SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot B" that are executed and shift to the high-accuracy high-base state, and high-accuracy low-base state in which high-accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds). .. In addition, the jackpot game state by "probability variation jackpot C" and "non-probability variation jackpot" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is a probability variation big hit, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 109SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 109SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In this feature unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot).

If the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to set the variation patterns to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) To decide from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have the same number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, while PB1-2 and PB1. The number of determination values assigned to -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is different. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 2 for PB1-1, 45 for PB1-2, 150 for PB1-3, 300 for PB1-4, and 500 for PB1-5. Each value is assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, there are 2 determination values for PB1-1, 30 determination values for PB1-2, 135 determination values for PB1-3, 315 determination values for PB1-4, and 515 determination values for PB1-5. Each is assigned. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 and β2 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1-4. Alternatively, since it is determined to be PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. To do. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern out of super reach β2).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 109SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40. It is a second, and it is a variable display that executes a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A as the reach effect of the super reach. The variable display of the super reach α2 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of the super reach, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of super reach, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 109SG is set to the highest jackpot expectation of super reach β2, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super reach α1, normal reach, non-reach, and the jackpot expectation is set higher in this order (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 109SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1 > Normal reach> Non-reach).

In other words, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 109SG, which of the ally character A and the ally character B displayed as the battle effect (the reach effect of the super reach) is the battle effect (super). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect) is the enemy character A or the enemy character B.

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 109SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 109SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 109SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 109SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. The reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A of the feature unit 109SG, the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 10-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS102; N). Step 109 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS105; N). Step 109 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 109 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start winning is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 109SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11) described later. The result) is set as a "big hit" and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 109SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 109SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 109SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 109SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. However, as shown in FIG. 10-9, among the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patterns within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 109 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 109SGS135), and the step Proceed to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern judgment table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random value MR3 is determined (step 109SGS138). In this feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

When the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; Y), or when the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228. In the case (109SGS228; Y), when the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the reception command is vacant in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 109SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used when the start prize is won. The form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the free area of the reception command buffer 109SG194A has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command, the hold storage number notification command If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and holds the hold storage (entry) in which the hold display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). If there is no hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Further, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed depends on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, the content of the process data of the variable display being executed may be referred to, and it may be determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (hold display flag is set). It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a miss or a jackpot. When it is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (symbol designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). ..

When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold memory display is displayed. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display pattern α or the white star that displays the hold memory display in the white square (◇) by always deciding the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is variable even when it is a big hit. A case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the display result is “off”.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 109SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area is indicated by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 109SG005U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) in a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, when the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "non". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than in the case of "reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α. Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable big hit)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the jackpot type will be "probability variable jackpot". Since the ratio is increased, the player's expectation can be increased.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 109 SGS249).

After the execution of step 109SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 109SGS249 (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS249). 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, as described above, even when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry is also entered. After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are shown in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", the display mode is "☆". It is displayed in. If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. Displayed in mode. If the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is a holding display of the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆", the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is displayed. Is displayed. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the hold storage display is also displayed in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 109SG, the screen is displayed) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory each time the variable display is executed. Shift toward the center of.

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, the feature unit 109SG determines in step 109SGS242 whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of starting winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 109SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 109SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Further, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 converts the variable display image data including the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols into the VRAM each time the first time elapses. The writing and display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 10-20).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; Y), the second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. Take control. As a result, the movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After the execution of step 109SGS288, or when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag during the effect display process (step). The value corresponding to S172) is set, and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is set to -1 (step 109SGS303c).

After the execution of step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variablely displayed (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

In step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer is timer-out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer is out of timer (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109 SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set again in the movable body control timer), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not the variable display of the super reach (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable body control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. Proceed to step 109SGS310 without proceeding.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109 SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during variable display including the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right. Image data of the screen to be displayed after the lapse of time) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (step 109SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 109SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 in the feature unit 109SG will be described. The variable display effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, when the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is started, the first enlarged display period , The character image displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of the super reach α1, the reach effect of the ally character A and the enemy character A, and the super reach α2 If there is, the enlarged display of the ally character A and the enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the normal display magnification (1 times) to the display magnification m1 at a constant speed, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The image is magnified at a constant speed up to a magnification of m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is magnified at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period elapses. ..

In the feature unit 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. Is the smallest. That is, in the feature unit 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest in the first enlargement display period and the slowest in the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: 1st enlarged display period> 2nd enlarged display period> 3rd enlarged display period). In the feature unit 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" means that the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is large.

After that, in the feature unit 109SG, the period T2, the third enlarged display period, and the character image are the combined period of the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect). A period including a predetermined period for maintaining the display magnification at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the period T3 ends and the variable display ends. As an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to a close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to each position. The movable body motion effect A for moving to the retracted position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed.

Hereinafter, in the present feature unit 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the detachment notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. For these periods T2 to period T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3).

Further, during the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the effect image is also displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion effect A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body extends over the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). A movable body motion suggestion effect A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are imaged from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over the period T4 as a part of the above-mentioned movable body motion effect A. It moves (spreads) toward the edge of the display device 5. The absolute value of the velocity V2 is larger than the absolute value of the velocity V1. That is, the movable body motion effect A in the feature unit 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves at a higher speed than the movable body motion suggestion effect A.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the light emission of the movable body LED109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable LED 109SG 495 has the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and the middle of the period T3 (more accurately). Causes the movable body LED109SG495 to emit light at brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable LED 109SG 495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, over the period T4.

In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, it is possible to output four types of production sounds such as BGM, SE (sound effect) of music, motion suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. The type of sound that is output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. Output is stopped. That is, the output of the BGM in the reach effect is executed from the start timing of the reach effect to the end timing of the period T2 and over the period T4.

Further, SE (sound effect) is a directing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. .. That is, the output of SE in the reach effect is executed over the entire reach effect.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. That is, the motion suggestion sound is output only in the period T2, which is the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and is not output in other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body operation effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only in the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion effect A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output in other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, when the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2 is started, the first enlarged display period, the first The character image displayed on the image display device 5 during the 2 enlarged display period and the 3rd enlarged display period (if the reach effect of the super reach β1, the ally character B and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach β2) Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

After that, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, the light emitting mode of the movable LED109SG495, the output of the BGM, SE, the operation suggestion sound, and the jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in FIG. The description of the same embodiment as the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 shown in 21 and FIG. 10-22 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is variable from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the respective retracted positions. The movable body motion effect B to be moved (changes the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed. The movable body effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4 in the same manner as the movable body effect A and the disconnection notification effect described above.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) is extended. The movable body motion suggestion effect B for repeatedly moving (reciprocating) the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is executed. The period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect B is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3 (). Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3> period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period are movable bodies. While the motion suggestion effect is executed, the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Further, in the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period has the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the third. The enlargement display period is set to the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), comparing the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. The 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. Does not operate, whereas the movable body motion suggestion effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggested position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B are compared, the movable body motion effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body moved to the effect position (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and a plurality of movable bodies 109SG402L are moved. This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S diffuses from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effected position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion effect A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, a display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), a while after the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 is started, , The decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (C). ) And FIG. 10-28 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (D) and FIG. (See FIG. 10-30 (A)) If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10). -32 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (F) and 10-. 34 (A)).

At the start of the reach effect of these super reaches, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are the upper left and right upper ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative symbols are temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach α1, is approached, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), allies The display of the moving image in which the character A attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) to 10-28 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (D) to 10-28 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A which have become these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (E) to 10-28 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 over a predetermined period. Display with. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. To.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A moving image in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at (lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) as the reach effect of the super reach α2 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (C). As described above, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (D) to 10-30 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31 (G) to 10-31 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. To.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at (lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) to 10-32 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (D) and 10-32 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (G) to 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at (lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (C) to 10-34 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B at the center of the image display device 5 is used as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in duplicate with the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an outlier notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified.
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 at (lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35, the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B enlarges the images of the ally character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since the display and the effect of the movable body motion effect B by the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the effect of the effect in the enlarged display period can be improved by changing the enlargement speed of the image of each character between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation effect can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period is slower than that of the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed is Since the enlargement speed is further slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed of the third enlarged display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this. (3) The enlargement speed of the enlarged display period may be the fastest, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period, the player pays attention to the reach effect by executing the look-ahead notice effect. Can be prevented from decreasing. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted over the entire execution period of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this. The period for restricting the execution may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as a form for restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, a form in which the look-ahead notice effect is not executed during the reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is not limited to this. During the production, the look-ahead notice production may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35. In addition, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5. That is, since the visibility of the reach effect effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the movable body operation suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether it is an operation or an operation as a movable body operation effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the effect image of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. Since the BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401. Since the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion effect is the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for it, and the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect becomes longer than the execution period of the movable body motion effect in the reach effect of the suggested target. The decrease can also be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation effect or the detachment notification effect, the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off. During the period when is off, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body is operated. In the motion effect B, all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether the movement is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1 and the movable body operation effect is produced. Since the movable body LED109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, the brightness of the movable body LED109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body movement effect is being executed. , The game entertainment during the execution of the movable body movement effect can also be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect image (the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B) is displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, the effect image of the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made to stand out, and the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are faster than the speed V1 in the image display device 5. Since it is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion effect A, and these Since the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden in the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the detachment notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is a movable body motion effect or an out-of-order notification effect.

Although the feature portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , An example in which the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the enlarged display start timing of the effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect is set before the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating operation of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect is performed. Can raise the attention of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the magnified display period and the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the magnified display period are substantially the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect. And by displaying an effect image or the like, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be different. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the image display device 5 can display the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, depending on the progress of the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character executed as the reach effect. The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, it corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies. The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

Further, when the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, the effect of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body is possible. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image having an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, thus improving the game entertainment. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the ally character and the enemy character are visually recognized in the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect. Although the form that does not change the sex is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body motion suggestion effect and the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification after the end of the enlarged display period are completed. In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, so that the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character is reduced. You may let me. Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed (when the variable display result is a big hit), the contrast and the brightness in the image display device 5 are changed from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state, which is further lower. The visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in visibility of the ally character and the enemy character in the image display device 5. At the time of executing the movable body effect, attention to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R can be raised.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-5, the moving body motion effect is being executed and the movable body is moving. The image display device 5 may display different effect images when the operation effect is being executed. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is calculated from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be more. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the image display device 5 displays the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the body motion effect compatible image, an image different from the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 can display the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are set. It may be different. By doing so, the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are combined with the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). It is possible to display in an appropriate period corresponding to (whether it is the execution of the movable body motion effect).

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect may be lowered by lowering the contrast and the brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the player's attention can be raised to the movable body motion effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the speaker 8L8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, and the image display device 5 When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the speaker 8L8R may output the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect. By doing so, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the time of executing the movable body motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed or the movable body motion effect is being executed.

Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 is movable from the timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. The display of the image corresponding to the body movement effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the movable body movement effect is started during the reach effect of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase the attention to the movable body motion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, in the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are directed toward the first movable body 109SG401 in the image display device 5. Although the mode in which the display of moving at the speed V1 is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to the speed of the first movable body 109SG401. The speed is changed to a low speed (changes the speed V1 to a low speed) as it approaches. The speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, so that the game is improved. it can.

Further, the feature unit 109SG outputs a motion suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, and notifies the jackpot of the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of outputting sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. ..

Further, in the case where a plurality of sounds can be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the motion suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect or the movable body motion effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and can be made according to the output timing. Since these motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the output timing of the operation suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the motion suggestion sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG 401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. , The first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG 401 is made to stand by at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. May be good. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the effect position, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, it is possible to evoke a player's expectation that the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is increased between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20, the feature unit 109SG controls the update of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body). Although the mode in which the movement control of the 109SG402R) is executed based on the control timer is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body are not limited to this. In addition to the movement control of the above, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1 and the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

When executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, for the effect control every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (S73 to S77 are executed every 1 ms in the main process of the effect control shown in FIG. 8), the update control of the effect image is performed every 33 ms, the movement control of the movable body is performed every 1 ms, and the LED. The lighting control of the timer may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the effect sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, for the third movable body) is always performed. Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, it is possible to preferably execute the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of light emitting modes of the movable body LED109SG495. The ratio of the movable body LED 109SG495 controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which mode the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed as the movable body motion suggestion effect A in any of the modes. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state may be different depending on the image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature unit 109SG performs a reciprocating motion (movable body motion suggestion effect) between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG 401 during the third enlarged display period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is executed even in the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a big hit, the third enlargement can be performed by enabling the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the third enlarged display period. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment suggesting the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B by repeatedly moving the body (movable body motion suggestion effect B) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these are specified. The execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in an aspect other than the display of the image of the above and the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED109SG495) as shown in the feature portion 109SG, the movable body operation effect A or the movable body operation depends on the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may suggest the execution of the effect B.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B in the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed (see FIGS. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)) in a reduced state is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28 (C)). And the timing of FIG. 10-30 (C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

In this way, when the image display device 5 starts displaying the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S from a timing before the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered, the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started. By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the ally character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be easier to see than when the contrast is lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (G) and the like, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 and displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part of the effect image is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image is displayed when the movable body motion effect is executed. The explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body motion effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, so that all the other effect images are invisible.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is not limited to this. The timing may be other than during the reach production of Super Reach. For example, as a modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B), and 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (H), a combination of decorative symbols is used. It may be possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from the reach to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B), the movable body motion suggestion effect is first started after the reach is reached, and in the image display device 5, the reach effect to be executed after that is highly expected (big hit). Reach effect (for example, reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) and low expectation (big hit game state) Which of the reach effects (for example, the reach effects with lower expectations than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) As a branching effect for notifying whether or not to branch to, the image of the character with the eyes closed is displayed. As the branching effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (C), during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expected reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character opening his eyes. That is, in the branch effect, the high-expectation reach effect is not executed (the low-expectation reach effect is executed) because the character displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened without opening the eyes. Be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), the low-expected reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H). It is notified that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed when the character is opening his eyes. At this time, the movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body movement effect and the branch effect are completed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

That is, the movable body motion effect may be executed as an effect of notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state as illustrated in the feature unit 109SG, but it is informed that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed. It may be executed as an effect to be performed (an effect to notify that the degree of expectation to be controlled by the jackpot game state is high).

In this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), the character in the state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed in the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character in a state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branching effect, the character is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the character opens his eyes.

As described above, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch of whether a low-expected reach effect or a high-expected reach effect is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is a character image (the first specific image is the image of the character with the eyes closed, the second specific image is the image of the character with the eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. Corresponds to the above-mentioned images such as concentrated lines.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as an effect for notifying that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, the movable body motion effect is executed. Although a mode in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed before the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion effect does not have to be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion effect may be different between the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed and the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed (the rate at which the high-expected reach effect is executed is different).

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is another gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) and movable bodies provided so as to be movable (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the look-ahead advance notice effect is displayed during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. The part that limits execution),
further,
The effect executing means is
The first effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) associated with the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (for example, the special symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B)) and
A second effect (for example, a re-variable display notification effect) that displays a character image as the variable display of the specific effect identification information is restarted after the first effect is executed.
Images such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., which can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted in the variable display of 1 after executing the second effect. ) Is displayed (for example, the first variable display start count notification effect) and
After executing the first information display effect, the size of the second information corresponding to the first information and having lower visibility than the first information (for example, smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect). It is possible to execute a second information display effect (for example, a second variable display start count notification effect) that displays images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4").
The execution period of the second effect is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect period of the revariable display notification effect is 3 seconds, while provisional. The production period of the stop notification effect is 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the execution period of the second effect in which the character image of the player's attention is displayed is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

That is, it is possible to improve the game interest by making the effect image more conspicuous, and it is possible to improve the game interest by performing the character effect in an appropriate period. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that easily attracts the player's interest when installed in the game hall.

Further, in the variable display for executing the first effect and the second effect, the effect using the movable body may be executed. For example, the display mode of the first information in the second effect may also be enlarged and displayed, or the display mode may be changed to suggest a big hit expectation. By doing so, the jackpot expectation can be estimated from the display mode of the first information, and the interest is improved.

Further, in the variable display for executing the first effect and the second effect, when the effect using the movable body is executed, the display mode of the effect image or the specific image for the movable body is prioritized over the display mode of the display of the first information. And display it. By doing so, it becomes possible to produce a movable body suitable for the player, and the interest is improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern).
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means is
The first effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) associated with the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (for example, the special symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B)) and
A second effect (for example, a re-variable display notification effect) that displays a character image as the variable display of the specific effect identification information is restarted after the first effect is executed.
Images such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., which can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted in the variable display of 1 after executing the second effect. ) Is displayed (for example, the first variable display start count notification effect) and
After executing the first information display effect, the size of the second information corresponding to the first information and having lower visibility than the first information (for example, smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect). It is possible to execute a second information display effect (for example, a second variable display start count notification effect) that displays images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4").
The execution period of the second effect is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the effect period of the revariable display notification effect is 3 seconds, while provisional. The production period of the stop notification effect is 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.) A game machine can be mentioned. A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), the initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S905). In step S905, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is enabled (step S9012). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Explanation of Feature 003SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 003SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 003SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 12-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 003SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 12-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal opening big hit state and the high-speed opening big hit state described later corresponds to Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning judgment result, a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or abrupt probability), and a small hit. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 12-1 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 12-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 12-2, in the feature unit 003SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 12-3 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 003SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 003SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 003SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the jackpot game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 003SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 003SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability change state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 12-3 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 003SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 003SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit that does not allow a large number of game balls to be acquired, and to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 12-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 003SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 003SG will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4 (B). In the feature unit 003SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by the "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 003SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 003SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 003SG, when it is determined to be "probability variation big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 12-5). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 003SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 12-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 003SG. In this feature unit 003SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 003SG provides two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and the normal reach fluctuation pattern may be set to 1. It may be only the type. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 003SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 12-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 003SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, the normal reach variation pattern in the feature unit 003SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed during the variable display and a pseudo-continuous effect that is executed once during the variable display. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the feature unit 003SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. ..

In addition, in this feature unit 003SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 003SG, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the present feature unit 003SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 003SG. In this feature unit 003SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-6, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super) It is decided from the reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern). When the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 2-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 3-time jackpot fluctuation pattern) ) And decide.

As shown in FIG. 12-6, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%. PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present feature unit 003SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where there is a non-probability variation jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, paying attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, more pseudo-continuous effects are generated during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 003SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 003SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production one-time out-of-range fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two missed super reach pseudo-continuous effects), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three missed super reach pseudo-continuous effects).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern) and PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 003SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 003SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special figure holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) occurs, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, and are periodically executed according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 12-7 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 003SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 003SG190 shown in FIG. 12-7 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 003SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 003SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 003SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 003SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 003SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 003SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 003SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 003SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 003SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 003SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 003SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 003SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 003SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 003SG194A as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 003SG194. The command buffer 003SG194A received at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 003SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 003SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A of the feature unit 003SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 7) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating the above and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A of the feature unit 003SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is reserved for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (Fig. 12-14), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a number of reserved memories, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. If the notification command is not received within the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D and the second hold storage display area 003SG5U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a quadrangle (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 003SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 003SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 003SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 003SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 12-8. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 003SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 003SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 003SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step 003 SGS 102 (step 003 SGS 102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (step 003SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 003SGS101 (step 003SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 003SGS102 (step 003SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 003 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 003SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 003SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 003 SGS 105 (step 003 SGS 105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (step). 003SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 003SGS103 and step 003SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 003SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 003SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 003SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 003SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 003SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 003SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 003SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 003SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 003SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 003SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 003 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 003SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 003SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 003SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 003SGS115), and then the process of step 003SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 003SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 003SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 12-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 003SGS112 of FIG. 12-9 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 003SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 12-10) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 5, FIG. 12-11) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 003SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine. The current gaming state in 1 is specified (step 003SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 003SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 12-3 is selected and set (step 003SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 003SGS109 of FIG. 12-8 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 003SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 003SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 003SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 003SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 2 is selected and set (step 003SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 003SGS109 of FIG. 12-8 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 003SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 003SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 003SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 003SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 003SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 003SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 003SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 003SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 003SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 003SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 003SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance, but among the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. For example, 498 (about 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, and the fluctuation pattern for deviation is assigned. In the judgment table B, 598 judgment values (about 60%) from 0 to 597 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the judgment value is for deviation. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values (about 70%) from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 (about 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 in the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take with respect to the variation pattern of the super reach. Is assigned.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 003SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 003SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (step 003SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 12-9 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 003SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 003SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 003 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 003SGS134a; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 003SGS135), and the step Proceed to 003SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 003SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 003SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 003SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 003SGS136), the process proceeds to step 003SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 003SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 003SGS137), the process proceeds to step 003SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 003SGS127, step 003SGS130, step 003SGS131, step 003SGS135, step 003SGS136, and step 003SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are executed. The variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above (step 003SGS138). In this feature unit 003SG, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 003SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 003SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 12-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12-10, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step 003SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 003SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 003SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 003SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 003SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (step 003SGS144), the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 003SGS141 (step 003SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 003SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 003SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. As described above, the process of step 003SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 003SGS141 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 003SGS145 (step 003SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 003SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 003SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 003SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 003SGS148), the process proceeds to step 003SGS149.

In step 003SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 12-3 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 003SGS150a). In this step 003SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 003SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 003 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 003SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 003SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 003SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-4 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 003SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 003SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 003SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 003SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 003SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 003SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 12-3 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 003SGS150c). In step 003SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 003SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 003SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on (step 003SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 003SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 003SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS156.

In step 003SGS156, as a result of pre-determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done), and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 003SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 003SGS154 is "probability variation big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the finalized special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 003SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 003SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 003SGS145 (step 003SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 003SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 003SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 003SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 003SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 003SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot B". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 003SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability change jackpot", the variable pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 003SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 003SGS165).

In the determination in step 003SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 003SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 003SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 003SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 003SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 003SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 003SGS166; N), the game state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in (step 003SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 003SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 003SGS168; Y). Step 003 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 003SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. The reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified by reading the above, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 003SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 003SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 003SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 003SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 003SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 003SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 003SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 003SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 003SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 003SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 003SGS164, step 003SGS165, step 003SGS167, step 003SGS169, step 003SGS171, step 003SGS173, and step 003SGS174, for example, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is executed. By referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table A to D based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 003SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined to be "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 003SGS175. That is, the process of step 003SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is "missing".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 003SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 003SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 003SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 003SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is sent to the game control buffer setting unit. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the provided send command buffer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is transmitted in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the command buffer.

After executing the process of step 003SGS172, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 003SGS173). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 003SGS174), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 003SGS172, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The designated command, the first variable start command or the second variable start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command will be transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 12-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 003SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 003SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 003SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 003SGS182; N), the small hit flag is further turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 003SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 003SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 003SGS190b). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 003SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 003SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 003SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 003SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 003SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 003SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 003SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening opening counter is set (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probable big hit A, 5 times in the case of probable change big hit B, 2 times in the case of probable change big hit C). (Step 003 SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 003SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 003SGS183; N), in step 003SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 003SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 003SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 003SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 003SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 003SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196 and the value of the time reduction counter. When is "0" (step 003SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 003SGS194), it corresponds to the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 003SGS195), the process proceeds to step 003SGS196.

In step 003SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 12-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 003SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 003SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) on the jackpot end display timer. Is set (step 003SGS204), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 003SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 003SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 003SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 003SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 003SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 003SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 003SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 003SGS210), the process proceeds to step 003SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 003SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 003SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 003SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 003SGS209), the process proceeds to step 003SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 003SGS205; Y), the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter by executing step 003SGS211 and step 003SGS212. After that, the process proceeds to step 003SGS213.

In step 003SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 003SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probabilistic change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 003SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 003SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 12-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 003SGS221). At this time, if there is no reception command (step 003SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set (set) in step 003SGS223 or step 003SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 003SGS237), if the waiting time for notifying the first or second reserved storage number has not elapsed (step 003SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second is before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 003SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry in which the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 003SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a receive command in step 003SGS221 (step 003SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 003 SGS222). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 003SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 003SGS223). For example, in the process of step 003SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 003SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command in step 003SGS222 is not the first start opening prize designation command (step 003SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 003SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 003SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 003SGS225). For example, in the process of step 003SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 003SGS224 (step 003SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 003SGS226). If the receive command is not a symbol designation command in step 003SGS226 (step 003SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the receive command is a variable category command (step 003SGS227). If the receive command is not a variable category command in step 003SGS227 (step 003SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 003SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 003SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 003SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 003SGS228 (step 003SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 003SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (step 003SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 003SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 003SGS229 and step 003SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is turned on (step). 003SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol specification command in step 003SGS226 (step 003SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 003SGS227 (step 003SGS227; Y), or step 003SGS223, step 003SGS225, step 003SGS232 After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A shown in FIG. 12-7 (step 003SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 003SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the fluctuation start command (first fluctuation start command or second fluctuation start command), the hold storage is stored. The number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 003SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 003SGS230 (step 003SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 003SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 003SGS223 or step 003SGS225 has elapsed (step 003SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 003SGS235; N), the process returns to step 003SGS221. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second hold before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 003SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect restriction flag of the corresponding unstored entry is turned on. After that (step 003SGS236), the process returns to the process of step 003SGS221.

FIG. 12-15 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the effect pattern (display pattern of the hold storage display) of the pre-read notice effect together with the presence / absence of the pre-read notice effect in the pre-read notice setting process (S161). Next, a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 003SG005D and the second hold storage display area 003SG005U of the image display device 5 to the display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A is performed. Execute (step 003SGS162).

FIG. 12-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIGS. 12-16, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display is being executed (step 003SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 003SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 003SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step 003SGS240b). As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (E), 12-29 (L), and 12-30 (S), the first variable display start count notification effect starts re-variable display as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1. Further, in step 003SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed may be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 003SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 003SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 003SGS240b; Y), the step By proceeding to 003SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect.

In step 003SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the start winning command buffer 003SG194A. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning, depending on whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (set to "1") (step 003SGS242). ..

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 003SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is finished, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 003SGS242; Y). , It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 003SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 003SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 003SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is displayed. , Set to the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the hold memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not the symbol designation command indicating the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 003SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 003SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of (step 003SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit and the jackpot type specified in step 003SGS244, the jackpot advance notice (not shown) is shown. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 003SGS245).

In step 003SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 12-17 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-17 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 003SGS244. ..

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D or the second hold storage display area 003SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold memory display is a white star (☆) and the first hold memory display area 003SG5D or the second hold memory display is displayed. It is displayed in area 003SG5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect may not be decided to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-17 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio of the display pattern β determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 003SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 003SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 003SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 003SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 003SGS247, an deviation (not shown) is shown. By referring to the time look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 003SGS248).

In step 003SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 12-17 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-17 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 003SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 003SG5D or the second hold storage display area is indicated by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 003SG5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star shape (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 003SG5D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 003SG5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D or the second hold storage display area 003SG5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 12-17 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-17 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 003SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 003SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 003SGS249).

After the execution of step 003SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 003SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 003SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 003SGS245 or step 003SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 003SGS245 or step 003SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 003SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 003SGS249 (step 003SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step). 003SGS250), the process proceeds to step 003SGS251.

After executing step 003SGS246 or step 003SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 003SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A (step 003SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is used according to the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A after the shift. The hold display of the first hold storage display area 003SG5D and the second hold storage display area 003SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As a display mode of this hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the hold display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. Displayed in mode. If the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is two, for example, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. As a mode, for example, the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of “◯”, and the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the second hold storage display area 003SG5U in the display mode of “☆”. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 003SG5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 003SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold storage display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (in the main feature unit 003SG, the center direction of the screen) as the hold memory is reduced (consumed).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 003SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 003SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 003SG5D and the second hold storage display area 003SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 003SG5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 003SG5U.

Although the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 003SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 003SG5D is not limited to this. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 003SG5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 003SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of the start winning in step 003SGS242, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning is determined. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 003SGS242 If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in this feature unit 003SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 003SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 003SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 003SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 003SGS271 (step 003SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 003SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 003SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 003SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the upper position (step 003SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 003SGS272 or step 003SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 003SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 003SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 003SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. It is a symbol, and a combination (outlier symbol) other than the above-mentioned chance eyes is determined. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach loss (missing symbol) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during the variable display (step 003SGS277). When the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display (step 003SGS277; Y), the notice effect determination process for the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). Is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 003SGS278).

After executing step 003SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (003SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 003SGS280). .. The temporary stop notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image to be displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative design is temporarily stopped by updating to the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the number of temporary stops is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third). Is a production that informs the player.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 003SGS281). When it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 003SGS281; Y), the process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 003SGS287 (step 003SGS282).

When the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (003SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (003SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. It is determined from 1.5 seconds (step 003 SGS283). Then, the process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 003SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 003SGS287 (step 003SGS284).

Further, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display (step 003SGS277; N), the notice effect determination process for the variable display that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the variable display is in progress. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed are determined (step 003SGS285). After deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed in step 003SGS285, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 003SGS287 (003SGS286).

In step 003SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected by any of 003SGS282, 003SGS284, and 003SGS286 (step 003SGS287).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 003SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 003SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 003SGS289). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 003SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 003SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect process is executed during the variable display, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer. If the process timer has timed out, the process is switched to the next process data, and the next process is performed again. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by starting the timer and controlling the effect device according to the absence of the next process data. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the advance notice effect in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effect execution process for executing the advance notice effect in the variable display during effect process. ..

Next, the flow of the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 12-19 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, first, a temporary stop suggestion suggesting a temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The production is executed. In the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 003SG, after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. This is a production that performs variable display at a lower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 003SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, and the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Is executed and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. If the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing B is reached, and the decoration is displayed. The temporary stop of the symbol is executed, and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 12-19 (A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has an effect period of 1.5 seconds and 2 Regardless of which of the seconds is determined, it is set to always end at a specific timing.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the revariable display notification effect is executed. In the revariable display notification effect, in addition to outputting the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image of the character corresponding to the number of revariable display times on the image display device 5 (character A if the number of revariable display times is the first). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of the character B for the second time and the image of the character C for the third time.

The first revariable display is executed during the revariable display notification effect. When the revariable display notification effect is completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the revariable display notification effect. In the first variable display start count notification effect, the variable display count of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image of the color corresponding to the variable display count is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production to display. That is, in the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first revariable display, "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and blue effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second revariable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the third revariable display, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and red is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is an effect that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification effect. The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect of displaying the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the revariable display number on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect.

After the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode and the normal reach reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-19 (B), when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display. Similar to the case where the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 12-19 (A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the first temporary stop and re-effect of the decorative symbol, respectively. Variable display, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, second variable display start number notification effect, and second temporary stop and revariable display are executed. Temporary stop and revariable display of decorative symbols, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, second variable display start number notification effect, and super reach reach effect Will be done.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). When the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also set in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). Is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second revariable display notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of a character (character B) different from that of the first revariable display effect. Further, in the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x3" ("x3" having a size smaller than that of the second first variable display start number notification effect in the second second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-20, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 12- Similar to the case where the fluctuation pattern shown in 19 (B) is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop and revariation of the decorative symbol up to the second time, respectively. After the display, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the third temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, provisional A stop notification effect, a revariable display notification effect, a first variable display start number notification effect, a second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and a super reach reach effect is further executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also set during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also performed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). It is executed in 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third revariable display notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of a character (character C) different from the first and second revariable display effects. Further, in the third variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x4" ("x4" having a size smaller than that of the third first variable display start number notification effect in the third second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 12-21, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop is first performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. .. That is, in the variable display executed by the special temporary stop notification effect, the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are different from the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed). The production period is unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification effect, the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed without executing the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, as the first revariable display notification effect, the image of the character (character A) is displayed or as the first variable display start number notification effect. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect has a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect "x2". Is only displayed

Then, after the first temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, special After the temporary stop notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the second variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 12-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-22, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 12-21. Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the third decorative symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop and revariable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the third variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 12-19 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x4" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

Although a part of the above is described, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature unit 003SG is a speaker 8L of the temporary stop notification sound from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , It is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting from 8R, and is an effect executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is the number of temporary stops of the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating to the background image according to the above (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third), the decorative design is temporarily stopped. It is a production that notifies the player. The special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display, while the temporary stop notification. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable display on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (if the re-variable display number is the first time, the character). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of A (the image of character B for the second time and the image of character C for the third time). The effect period of the revariable display notification effect (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the revariable display is executed. Seconds. As described above, in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop / re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation is set, so that the variable display is re-variable. Regarding the display notification effect, the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start number notification effect is for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the revariable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect, and the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including these revariable displays is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display In the start number notification effect, "x3" is displayed, and in the third variable display start number notification effect, "x4") is displayed. The effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect is 1 second regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , The number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display start number notification In the production, "x3" is displayed for the third time as well as "x4" in the first variable display start number notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect. The effect period of the second variable display start number notification effect is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

FIG. 12-24 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 12-18. In the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 003SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. The production is determined (step 003SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-24 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 20%. The execution of the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

The cut-in notice effect is an effect in which the cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-28 (F), and the group notice effect is an effect shown in FIG. 12-28 (G). As shown, this is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 0%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the feature unit 003SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo-ream). Expectation of big hit regarding notice production in variable display to execute production: cut-in notice production + group notice production> group notice production> cut-in production> non-execution).

After the execution of step 003SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the notice effect (determines the execution of at least one of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect) (step 003SGS303). When the execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been decided (step 003SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) is terminated, and when the execution of any of the advance notice effects is decided (step 003SGS303; N). Y) stores the determined advance notice effect, sets the advance notice effect start waiting timer, and ends the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) (step 003SGS304, step 003SGS305).

As shown in FIGS. 12-27, the executable period of these advance notice effects overlaps with the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start number notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are taken during the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period. The production is executed in duplicate.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, when the execution of any of the advance notice effects is decided in the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the same advance notice effect is executed in all the revariable display notification effect periods. (See FIGS. 12-28 to 12-30).

FIG. 12-25 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 12-18. In the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 003SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random number value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the advance notice to be executed. The production is determined (step 003SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 30%. The execution of the group notice production is decided at the ratio of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice production is decided at a rate of 2%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in this feature unit 003SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed (big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect: group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 003SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 003SGS313). If the execution of the advance notice effect has not been decided (step 003SGS313; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect) is terminated, and if the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (step 003SGS313; Y), The determined advance notice effect is stored, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (for when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed) (step 003SGS314, step 003SGS315).

When the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the advance notice effect may be executed in any period during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 12-26 (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect in step 003SG280 in FIG. 12-18. In step 003SG280 in FIG. 12-18, if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach big hit), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (executes the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach is off), the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed (execution of the special temporary stop notification effect). (Non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present feature unit 003SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed. When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol; The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the temporary stop notification effect is executed (the jackpot expectation in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: special temporary stop notification effect execution> special temporary stop notification effect not executed). ..

Further, as described above, paying attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image corresponds to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The first special background image is only displayed on the display device 5, but when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 responds to the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern. After the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (first special background image). The third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (from the second special background image). (Updated to the 3rd special background image).

That is, with respect to the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Therefore, the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is set. Is set to have the highest jackpot expectation when is the third special background image, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. Big hit expectation for the special background image that is set (in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect) that is finally displayed on the image display device 5: 3rd special background image> 2nd special background image> 1st special background image ).

FIG. 12-26 (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 003SG283 in FIG. 12-18. In step 003SG283 in FIG. 12-18, if the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. The temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the jackpot expectation regarding the production period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect). : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds)> Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is not limited to this. It may be uniquely determined in one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which a longer temporary stop notification effect period has a higher expectation of a big hit than a shorter temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a shorter temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation of a big hit than a longer temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 12-27, first, the speakers 8L and 8R can output BGM (musical music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during variable display excluding the revariable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a revariable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification effect period, and the revariable display notification sound is output only during the revariable display notification effect period. The 1 variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided, and the group notice effect sound is decided to execute the group notice effect. If so, it is output only during the group notice effect execution period.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 12-27, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the revariable display notification effect period from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output of the BGM is limited, the output of the BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the revariable display notification effect period. Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification effect period, the speakers 8L and 8R output. In addition to the first variable display start count notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, a cut-in notice effect sound, and a group notice effect sound are output.

Next, regarding the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect in the feature unit 003SG, FIGS. 12-28 to 12-32 show an example of the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect three times. It will be explained based on.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) to 12-28 (C), the variable display is started for a while. The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, a special symbol (a symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B)) indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Variable display is performed at a slower speed than usual. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-production period ends, the special symbol temporarily stops. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (D) to 12-28 (G), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in notice effect overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Group notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the blue effect image is started at. When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the first second variable display start number notification effect, "x2" having a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

Shortly after the first second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (J), the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". At the same time as stopping, a special symbol (a symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-29 (J)) indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-29 (K) to 12-29 (O), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the second revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The blue effect image is hidden during the execution of the second revariable display notification effect. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the green effect image is started at. When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the second second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

Shortly after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (Q), the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". At the same time, the special symbol (the symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIG. 12-30 (Q)) is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-30 (R) to 12-30 (V), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the third revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The green effect image is hidden during the execution of the third revariable display notification effect. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the red effect image is started at. When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" having a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

After that, the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and as a variable display result, the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss. The effect images displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5 during the variable display may end at the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach, or at the timing when the variable display ends. You may end the display.

Next, when it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (A) to 12-31 (C), the variable display is started for a while. The decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, a special symbol (a symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-31 (B)) indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle" Variable display is performed at a slower speed than usual. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-production period ends, the special symbol temporarily stops. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 12-31 (D) to 12-31 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the first special background image and the first time. The re-variable display of the decorative pattern of is started. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is executed in duplicate with the revariable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group notice effect are completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start number notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (I) to 12-32 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The image is displayed on the second special background image, and the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative pattern is revariably displayed, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the like. The third variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, the reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 003SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the temporary stop notification effect accompanying the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is regenerated after the temporary stop notification effect. It is possible to execute a revariable display notification effect that displays a character image along with the variable display and notifies the execution of the revariable display, and the number of revariable displays can be specified after the revariable display notification effect. It is possible to execute the first variable display start number notification effect that displays images such as "2", "x3", and "x4", and specify the number of revariable display after the first variable display start number notification effect. It is possible to execute the second variable display number notification effect that displays possible images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" in a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect. ..

Of the effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120, the effect period of the revariable display notification effect is set to 3 seconds, while the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds. There is. That is, in the revariable display notification effect, the revariable display notification effect in which the character image of the player's attention is displayed is executed for a longer period of time than the temporary stop notification effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Although the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the revariable display notification effect is executed for a longer period of time than the temporary stop notification effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect is provided. It may be executed for a longer period of time than the revariable display notification effect.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, as the second variable display start number notification effect, an image such as "x2", "x3", "x4" that can specify the number of revariable display is displayed on the image display device 5. An example is shown in the upper left portion where the image is displayed in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the visibility is higher than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. If it can be reduced and displayed, an image such as "x2", "x3", "x4" that can specify the number of these revariable displays in the second variable display start number notification effect can be set to an arbitrary mode. May be displayed. For example, in the second variable display start number notification effect, images such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" that can specify the number of revariable display are displayed more than the first variable display start number notification effect. Display smaller, change the display area in the image display device 5 in the first variable display start count notification effect, change the display color and brightness in the first variable display start count notification effect, depending on the movable body or other image The display may be hidden.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-27, the speakers 8L and 8R can output BGM as a sound corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and during the period during which the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. During (during the revariable display notification effect period), the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is restricted, while the period outside the revariable display notification effect period (the first variable display start count notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R). Since the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the period during which is output (including during the first variable display start number notification effect period), the revariable display notification is performed by the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to prevent the effect of the sound from being hindered, and the output of the BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R can improve the effect of the first variable display start count notification sound, so that an appropriate sound can be produced according to the effect. It is possible to output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In this feature unit 003SG, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is restricted during the period when the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume of the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the period when the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output limit of BGM may be realized by the decrease of.

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is limited during the period in which the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited, and may not be limited even during the period during which the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the output of the BGM is not limited during the output of the temporary stop suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the speaker is not limited to this. The output of the BGM may be limited during the output of the temporary stop suggestion sound from the 8L and 8R. By doing so, the effect of the temporary stop suggestion sound is not hindered by the BGM, so that the player can easily recognize the mowing stop suggestion sound, and the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-27, during the period during which the temporary stop suggestion sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM is output together with the temporary stop suggestion sound, while the first variable from the speakers 8L and 8R. During the period when the display start number notification sound is output, the BGM, the cut-in notice effect sound, and the group notice effect sound may be output together with the first variable display start number notification sound. Can raise the attention of the temporary stop suggestion effect by making it easier for the player to recognize the temporary stop suggestion sound, while during the first variable display start number notification effect, together with the first variable display start number notification sound. Since the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R can be varied, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can display an image of a different character on the image display device 5 as a revariable display notification effect, and finally determines the jackpot expectation degree according to the image of the character displayed on the image display device 5. Since it can be made different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the production mode of the revariable display notification effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can determine whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect. When executing, the effect of the special temporary stop notification effect is the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display by not executing the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect after the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to being hindered by the start count notification effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a look-ahead advance notice effect as an effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit, and the start prize is held during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect. Since the look-ahead notice effect is not executed for the memory (the hold display is displayed with "○"), it is possible to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated due to the first variable display start number notification effect being hindered by the look-ahead notice effect.

The feature unit 003SG exemplifies a form in which the specific advance notice effect in the present invention is a look-ahead advance notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific advance notice effect is a variable display during execution. In addition to the pre-reading advance notice effect that can be executed regardless of the timing, the effect may be executed from a specific timing of the variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, as an example of restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice effect during the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect, a mode in which the look-ahead notice effect is not executed is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As a form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect during the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect, the pre-reading notice effect is performed at a rate lower than that when the first variable display start number notification effect is not executed. It may be executable, and during the execution of the first variable display start count notification effect, it can only be executed in a specific display pattern of the look-ahead notice effect (for example, a display pattern α having a lower jackpot expectation than the display pattern β). May be.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 to 12-30, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the revariable display number of times at the left and right ends of the image display device 5 as a part of the first variable display start number notification effect. Since the effect images can be displayed and these effect images are hidden during the execution of the revariable display notification effect, the effect of the revariable display notification effect is hindered by the effect image, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be prevented.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the display of the effect image according to the number of revariable display times at the left and right ends of the image display device 5 as a special effect in the present invention, and the revariable display notification. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the special effect is restricted by hiding these effect images during the execution of the effect is illustrated, the invention is not limited to this, and the revariable display notification effect is being executed. As a form of restricting the execution of the special effect, the effect image may be displayed in a display area different from that when the revariable display notification effect is not executed, or the size is smaller than that when the revariable display notification effect is not executed. You may display the effect image with. Further, during the execution of the revariable display notification effect, the effect image may be displayed at a lower rate than when the revariable display notification effect is not executed.

Although the feature portion 003SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. ..

For example, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a form in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with a movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 12-33 as a modified example 003SG-1. The movable body 003SG005K that can operate between the retracted position that does not interfere with the display of the image display device 5 and the front position (effect position) of the image display device 5 may be provided. When the movable body 003SG005K is provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, the movable body 003SG005K is operated from the retracted position to the effect position during the revariable display notification effect period during the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect. On the other hand, the operation of the movable body 003SG005K from the retracted position to the effect position may not be restricted during the first variable display start number notification effect period. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display of the revariable display notification effect, the cut-in notice effect, and the group notice effect from being hindered by the movable body 003SG005K moving to the effect position during the revariable display notification effect period. In addition, during the first variable display number notification effect period, the first variable display number notification effect can be emphasized by the operation of the movable body 003SG005K, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 003SG-2 As shown in FIG. 12-34 (A), the variable display direction of the decorative symbol may be executed from the back side to the front side of the screen of the image display device 5, or from the right side to the left side of the image display device 5. It may be executed toward the direction (or from the left to the right).

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect, a mode in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 12-34 (B) and 12-34 (C) of the modified example 003SG-2, as a pseudo-continuous effect, even if the decorative symbol showing a normal number is temporarily stopped. Good. In addition, when the decorative pattern showing the normal number is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect in this way, a combination of so-called shifts such as "112" and "556", and a continuous number such as "123" and "456" are used. , And even or odd combinations of decorative symbols such as "135" and "246" may be temporarily stopped. That is, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a form in which the specific effect identification information in the present invention is a special symbol (a symbol displayed as "NEXT" shown in FIGS. 12-28 (B) and the like). Is not limited to this, and the specific effect identification information in the present invention is a combination of so-called shifts such as "112" and "556" described above, and a combination of consecutive numbers such as "123" and "456". , "135", "246", and other even-numbered and odd-numbered combinations of decorative patterns, and other decorative patterns indicating ordinary numbers may be used. Further, when the decorative pattern includes the image of the character as shown in FIGS. 12-34 (B) and 12-34 (C), the revariable display is performed as shown in FIG. 12-34 (D). As a notification effect, an effect in which the character pops out from the decorative pattern may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the revariable display notification effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the same special symbol is always temporarily stopped regardless of the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 12-35 (A) to 12-35 (C) as a modified example 003SG-3, the special symbol to be temporarily stopped depends on the number of revariable display times to be executed after the temporary stop. It may be different. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the revariable display number of times each time the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds at the start of the variable display, and during the variable display, all temporary stops are performed during the determined effect period. An example is illustrated in which the notification effect can be executed, that is, the effect period is the same for the first and second times of the temporary stop notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modified example. As 003SG-4, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect can be determined by each temporary stop notification effect (the temporary stop notification effect can be executed by making the first effect period and the second effect period different). May be. In particular, in such a case, the production period of each revariable display notification effect is not different (the production period of the revariable display notification effect is not different between the first and second times) and each first variable. The effect period of the display start number notification effect may not be different from the effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect (the effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect may not be different between the first time and the second time). By doing so, it is possible to maintain the effect of the revariable display notification effect and the effect of the first variable display start number notification effect, and it is possible to make the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect different for each execution number. , The variation of the temporary stop notification effect can be increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

As described above, in the present feature unit 003SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed a plurality of times during the variable display, the embodiment in which all the temporary stop notification effect periods are set to the period determined in step 003SG283 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo continuous effect is executed a plurality of times during the variable display, a different period may be determined for each temporary stop notification effect period.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, the revariable display notification effect as the second effect of the present invention is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, it is re-executed regardless of whether the special temporary stop notification effect is executed or not executed. The variable display notification effect may not be executed.

Further, the feature unit 263SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of controlling an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, according to the present invention, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) by operating a predetermined setting changeover switch. It may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine with a setting function) in which the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the set value. That is, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine provided with an advantage setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player.

When the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function as described above, as a modification 003SG-5, a special aspect suggesting that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state during variable display, and a suggestion regarding a set value ( For example, the effect being variably displayed by one of a plurality of types of effect modes including a set value and a specific mode for performing (suggestion of whether or not the set value has been changed since the previous startup). May be feasible.

In particular, when such a variable display effect can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display, the variable display effect is executed at the first of these multiple times, and after the first time. By making it possible to execute the variable display effect in a specific mode at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in the second number of times, the variable display effect in the specific mode can be performed in the first and second times. Even if it is executed by either of them, the same expectation can be made for the execution of the effect during variable display of a specific mode.

Further, in this way, when a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is different depending on the set set values, a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop are performed. The set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on the production mode related to the pseudo-continuous production such as the notification effect, the re-variable display notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect. , It may be possible to suggest that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the production mode of the production related to the pseudo-continuous production, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 003SG exemplifies a mode in which the variable display result may be out of order even when the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times, which is the maximum number of times during the variable display. The present invention is not limited, and for example, in the case of the feature unit 003SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to four times during the variable display, and the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect four times is provided only for the jackpot variation pattern. Then, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display, the variable display result may be a big hit.

If it is determined that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing the pseudo-continuous effect a maximum number of times during the variable display, the variable display result will be a big hit after the maximum number of pseudo-continuous effects are executed. It is also possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect for notifying that, and not execute other effects such as the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. By not executing the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect during the jackpot confirmation effect in this way, the player can be focused on the jackpot demarcation effect, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 to 12-30, the effect control CPU 120 performs the second variable display start number notification effect after the first variable display start number notification effect is completed. Although the form of starting is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 starts the second variable display start number notification effect from the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 003SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. A slot machine or a general game machine may be used in addition to the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, in the present specification, a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are illustrated as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. Alternatively, only one feature portion or modification may be carried out.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Movable body provided to operate and
A specific effect that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific effect is executed. And, the production execution means that can execute,
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed.
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed.
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. The rate of control is different,
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image.
It is possible to execute a notice effect that announces that it will be controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted.
further,
The effect executing means is
The first effect that accompanies the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information,
After executing the first effect, the second effect of displaying the character image with the resumption of the variable display of the specific effect identification information, and the second effect.
After executing the second effect, the first information display effect that displays the first information that can specify the number of times the variable display is restarted in the variable display of 1 and the first information display effect.
After executing the first information display effect, it is possible to execute a second information display effect that displays second information that is information corresponding to the first information and has lower visibility than the first information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution period of the second effect is longer than the execution period of the first information display effect.

Images